Powerpoint Basics version 2007 (Windows) and …idea.uwosh.edu/nick/PPT2007_2008Basics.pdf · 2....

23
1 Powerpoint Basics version 2007 (Windows) and 2008 Macintosh Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows) ............................. 1 Microsoft Office Button ..................................................... 3 A new file format .................................................................. 3 Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)........................... 4 Applying a theme................................................................... 5 Fonts and moving to a different computer. ................................................................ 5 The size of the slide image.................................................. 6 Entering text on a slide (Windows and Mac)................ 6 Inserting a new slide ............................................................. 7 Changing the layout of a slide ............................................ 7 Outline levels on a bulleted list.......................................... 8 Changing attributes of text ................................................. 8 Changing the color of text.................................................. 9 More Colors........................................................................... 9 Changing line and paragraph spacing............................... 10 Examples of line spacing choices ..................................... 10 Removing bullets ................................................................. 11 Changing indents ................................................................. 11 Changing margins ................................................................ 11 Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return) .......................................... 11 Moving text blocks ............................................................. 11 Moving around your presentation................................... 12 View your presentation in the full screen mode ......... 12 Changing the order of slides ............................................ 13 The Slide Sorter view ........................................................ 13 Selecting multiple slides ..................................................... 13 Adding transition effects between slides ...................... 14 Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list ........ 15 Inserting Images ................................................................... 16 The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint ................................................ 16 Changing the size of digital images (before importing) ............................................................. 17 Inserting a Picture Windows ........................................... 17 Resizing images before inserting...................................... 17 Inserting a Picture Macintosh ........................................... 18 Cutting and pasting from other applications ................ 18 Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows) ........................ 18 Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh) ..................... 19 Rotation................................................................................. 19 Moving the image ................................................................ 19 Resizing the image............................................................... 20 Adjusting brightness and contrast ................................... 20 Cropping the image ............................................................ 21 Transparent color tool ....................................................... 21 Reset picture tool ............................................................... 21 Inserting Clip Art ................................................................ 22 Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows) ........................... 22 Selecting clip art in 2008 (Macintosh) ............................ 23 Resizing, Moving and Rotating Clip Art ......................... 23 Nick Dvoracek. [email protected] (920) 424-7363 For guides to other versions of Powerpoint and handouts on other multimedia topics see http://idea.uwosh.edu/nick/handouts.htm

Transcript of Powerpoint Basics version 2007 (Windows) and …idea.uwosh.edu/nick/PPT2007_2008Basics.pdf · 2....

1

Powerpoint Basics version 2007 (Windows) and 2008 Macintosh

Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows) 1

Microsoft Office Button 3

A new file format 3

Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh) 4

Applying a theme 5

Fonts and moving to a different computer 5

The size of the slide image 6

Entering text on a slide (Windows and Mac) 6

Inserting a new slide 7

Changing the layout of a slide 7

Outline levels on a bulleted list 8

Changing attributes of text 8

Changing the color of text 9

More Colors 9

Changing line and paragraph spacing 10

Examples of line spacing choices 10

Removing bullets 11

Changing indents 11

Changing margins 11

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return) 11

Moving text blocks 11

Moving around your presentation 12

View your presentation in the full screen mode 12

Changing the order of slides 13

The Slide Sorter view 13

Selecting multiple slides 13

Adding transition effects between slides 14

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list 15

Inserting Images 16

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint 16

Changing the size of digital images (before importing) 17

Inserting a Picture Windows 17

Resizing images before inserting 17

Inserting a Picture Macintosh 18

Cutting and pasting from other applications 18

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows) 18

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh) 19

Rotation 19

Moving the image 19

Resizing the image 20

Adjusting brightness and contrast 20

Cropping the image 21

Transparent color tool 21

Reset picture tool 21

Inserting Clip Art 22

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows) 22

Selecting clip art in 2008 (Macintosh) 23

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art 23

Nick Dvoracek dvoracekuwoshedu (920) 424-7363

For guides to other versions of Powerpoint and handouts on other multimedia topics see httpideauwoshedunickhandoutshtm

2

When you launch Powerpoint you are presented with the first slide in the Title layout of a blank presentation in the Normal view

RibbonsThe most notable difference from earlier versions of Powerpoint and all other programs yoursquove ever used is the lack of menus at the top of the screen and the Task Pane and toolbars Replacing them are the Ribbons selected by tabs near the top of the screen which contain all the commands and property settings used to create and modify your presentation

Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)

The exception is the Mystery Meat Microsoft Office Button (see next page)

Some items on the Ribbons have a down pointing triangle which indicates more options are available Clicking will display a menu

Some items on the Ribbons have an arrow in a box Clicking the arrow displays a dialogue box with which properties can be specified

Views Button

Choose between Normal Slide Sorter and Presenta-tion views

Notes window

Notes for yourself when presenting or a place to record a complete narrative if yoursquore posting your presentation on-line

ThumbnailOutline

Choose between viewing Thumbnail images of your slides or viewing the text in an outline format

Save undo and redo

3

Microsoft Office Button

If yoursquore looking for all the things that normally show up under the File menu theyrsquore now located under the unlabeled Microsoft Office Button

A new file format

Both 2007 (Windows) and 2008 (Macintosh) save files in a new file format using the file extension pptx

The main advantage of the new for-mat is that files are significantly smaller

Users of some earlier versions of Powerpoint 2000 XP(2002) and 2003 can download a plug-in that allows them to open the new format There are no converters for earlier Macintosh versions

If you donrsquot know what version of Powerpoint your presentation will be viewed in you can save it in the old format (ppt) The new versions will open the older format

If you know that you will be presenting with Powerpoint 2007 or 2008 the new format will save your presentation with a significantly smaller file size

Windows

Macintosh

4

When you launch Powerpoint 2008 you are also presented with the first slide in the Title layout of a blank presentation in the Normal view

The Macintosh version still has menus and toolbars Only the Drawing toolbar and Formatting Palette are floating palletes The other toolbars appear in a stack at the top of the screen

Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)

Views Menu

Choose between Normal Slide Sorter and Presentation views

Notes window

Notes for yourself when presenting or a place to record a complete narrative if yoursquore posting your presentation on-line

ThumbnailOutline Pane

Choose between viewing Thumbnail images of your slides or viewing the text in an outline format

Formatting Palette

shows commonly used commands and propertiesndashchanges to show func-tions yoursquore most like to need depend-ing on what yoursquore doing

Drawing toolbar

Used to create and modify graphics

Standard Toolbar

Contains the most common commands

Gallery

Toggles between showing and hiding the Elements Galleries

Elements Galleries

Clicking on these tabs will reveal collections of things from which you can choose in a bar that extends across the window

5

Applying a theme

Referred to as Templates in previous versions Themes define the colors fonts and graphics common to all slides

Windows

Click on the Design tab Mousing over a selection will preview that template in your main window Click to select the theme

Note that there is a scroll bar to the right to show several more rows of choices

To the right of the scroll bar are menus with which you can choose variations in the color palette font and line and fill effects to customize your theme As with the Theme itself mousing over a selection will preview it in your main window and clicking will select it Any theme and variation will be applied to all slides in the presentation

You can apply a different theme to a selected group of slides by right clicking on the theme and selecting Apply to Selected slides in the menu that pops up

Macintosh

Click on the Slide Themes tab to reveal a selection of Themes Note the arrows to the right to display another selection of themes There is no preview You have to click on a theme to apply it to your presentation to get a better view of what it looks like

When you select the Slide Themes tab a Document Theme section appears in the Formatting Palette which allows you to select variations on color and font for your theme

Fonts and moving to a different computer

If you select a different font to apply to your Theme when you move you presentation to a new computer that computer must have that font installed for your presentation to display properly (If it doesnrsquot it will probably defaut to Arial)

On both Windows and Macintosh the selections presented are only those that are installed with that version of Microsoft Office so if yoursquore moving to another computer with that version of Office yoursquore pretty safe

In Windows you have several other options In the Save dialogue box there is a Tools menu which includes a Save Options command In the dialogue that command brings up is a choice to Embed fonts in the presentation insuring that it will display properly on any Windows Computer so you can use any font in your presentation not just the Office fonts

There is no option to embed fonts with the Macintosh version of Powerpoint

6

Entering text on a slide (Windows and Mac)

Unlike word processors which have one continuous string of text graphics programs like PowerPoint can have numerous completely independent text blocks

Text block for slide title

Text block for slide subtitle

The text ldquoClick to add titlerdquo and ldquoClick to add textrdquo are placeholders They are there just to show you the location size etc of the title and text you will put there

When you move the cursor inside the dotted line that defines the title area it will change to the ldquoI-Beamrdquo similar to what you see in a wordprocessor

When you click the placeholder will disappear a flashing insertion point appears and you can begin typing

The text will appear with the size style color and alignment that was defined in the template

After yoursquove typed the title in order to move to the subtitle move the cursor into that area click in that area to begin typing the subtitle

The size of the slide image

Notice that there are no horizontal or vertical scroll bars on the window with the image of the slide since you are looking at a reduced size version of the entire slide The size will depend on the size of your display

The amount of reduction can be seen in 2007 (Windows) with the Size indicator at the bottom right corner of the screen and in 2008 (Macintosh) in the Zoom indicator window at the right size of the Standard tool bar Full size (100) is 75 by 10 inches the size the slide would be if you printed it Depending on the size of your display in the presentation mode the slide may be greater than 100

nb When you have more slides there will be a vertical scroll bar which will allow you to move around your presentation

Windows

Macintosh

7

Inserting a new slide

Changing the layout of a slide

New slides can be inserted by clicking on the New Slide icon on the Home Ribbon (not the Insert Ribbon) in 2007 (Windows) or on the New Slide icon on the Standard Toolbar in 2008 Macintosh (There is also a New Slide command under the Insert menu in the Macintosh version)

Windows

Macintosh

Windows

Macintosh

The first slide in your presentation had the Title Layout The new slide which you just created will have the Title and Content Layout which allows you to type a bulleted list or insert several types of other content

You can change the slide to other layouts for other purposes such as

middot Title Only or Blank for graphics slides

middot Two Content slides for two columns or an im-age and some text side by side

middot Title or Section Header to indicate major sections of your presentation

Windows

Next to the Insert Slide icon is a Layout menu

Macintosh

Click the Slide Layouts tab to display the Slide Layouts Gallery

If you change the layout of a slide the next slide you insert will have that same layout

8

Outline levels on a bulleted list

In the bulleted list in order to create a new bullet press Return

In order to create a 2nd level bullet press Return then Tab At the end of the item pressing Return will start another 2nd level bullet

To indent to a further level press Return and Tab again

In order to return to a higher level after pressing Return press the Shift and Tab keys together

You can also change the level of an item by clicking anywhere in the line and clicking the PromoteDemote button which is in the center of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Bullets and Number section of the Formatting Pallette in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Promote to a higher outline level

Demote to a lower outline level

If you find yourself going to the third and lower levels of an outline consider using multiple slides to present these as separate points to make your presentation more focused

Changing attributes of text

Text formatting functions are found in the middle of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in several sec-tions of the Formatting Pallete in 2008 (Macintosh)

In order to change the attributes of text it has to be selectedmdashthat is you click and drag over the text you want to change For some functions that apply to whole paragraphs or whole text blocks you can just click anywhere in the text block If you donrsquot have anything selected commands and functions will appear faded out and wonrsquot do anything

9

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Hue

Sat

urat

ion

Bri

ghtn

ess

Hue

Saturation

Bri

ghtn

ess

Changing the color of text

You can emphasize or highlight certain words or passages by changing the color of the text

The Text Color icon is on the Home Ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Font section of the Formatting Palette in 2008 (Macintosh) The icon is in two parts Clicking the left side with the letter A and the color swatch will change any selected text to the last color used Clicking the right side with the small downward pointing triangle will bring down a menu

The top row are the color scheme of the template The last six are intended as accent colors but may not all provide enough contrast to be readable against the background

The next block provides tints of the color scheme colors These may be provide better contrast against the background

Then are a selection of commonly used colors

Any custom colors you create are added in the next row

You can create those custom colors by selecting More Colors

More Colors

Selecting More Colors in Text Color menu brings up a dialogue box with a palette of colors

New colors can be chosen off the Standard Pallete or mixed with the Custom palette

The pallettes look a little different on the Macintosh but work essentially the same way There are also several other schemes to define colors available on the Macintosh

10

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is an icon in the Alignment and Spacing section that you can click to increase or decrease paragraph spacing

In order to numerically control paragraph spacing under the Format menu select the Paragraph command That will display a dialogue box which will allow to adjust Paragraph Spacing

Changing line and paragraph spacing

Occasionally you might want to separate bullet points with additional spacing Most peoplersquos first instinct is to put extra hard returns but that puts unnecessarily large spaces between point Another common response is to increase line spacing but that puts the same amount of space within a bullet point as it does between bullet points making it difficult to separate one point from another The best response is to use Paragraph Spacing which give you variable spacing between points but leaves normal spacing within a point

LIne spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that

wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Hard returns between points

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Paragraph spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Same amount of space within a point as between points Hard to ready

Normal spacing within points but too much between points

Normal spacing within points and just enough between points to separate them

Examples of line spacing choices

In 2007 (Windows) on the Home ribbon there is a Line Spacing icon to the right side of the text formatting section Use that to pull down a menu and select Line Spacing Options That displays a dialogue box which allows you to adjust Paragraph Spacing

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

2

When you launch Powerpoint you are presented with the first slide in the Title layout of a blank presentation in the Normal view

RibbonsThe most notable difference from earlier versions of Powerpoint and all other programs yoursquove ever used is the lack of menus at the top of the screen and the Task Pane and toolbars Replacing them are the Ribbons selected by tabs near the top of the screen which contain all the commands and property settings used to create and modify your presentation

Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)

The exception is the Mystery Meat Microsoft Office Button (see next page)

Some items on the Ribbons have a down pointing triangle which indicates more options are available Clicking will display a menu

Some items on the Ribbons have an arrow in a box Clicking the arrow displays a dialogue box with which properties can be specified

Views Button

Choose between Normal Slide Sorter and Presenta-tion views

Notes window

Notes for yourself when presenting or a place to record a complete narrative if yoursquore posting your presentation on-line

ThumbnailOutline

Choose between viewing Thumbnail images of your slides or viewing the text in an outline format

Save undo and redo

3

Microsoft Office Button

If yoursquore looking for all the things that normally show up under the File menu theyrsquore now located under the unlabeled Microsoft Office Button

A new file format

Both 2007 (Windows) and 2008 (Macintosh) save files in a new file format using the file extension pptx

The main advantage of the new for-mat is that files are significantly smaller

Users of some earlier versions of Powerpoint 2000 XP(2002) and 2003 can download a plug-in that allows them to open the new format There are no converters for earlier Macintosh versions

If you donrsquot know what version of Powerpoint your presentation will be viewed in you can save it in the old format (ppt) The new versions will open the older format

If you know that you will be presenting with Powerpoint 2007 or 2008 the new format will save your presentation with a significantly smaller file size

Windows

Macintosh

4

When you launch Powerpoint 2008 you are also presented with the first slide in the Title layout of a blank presentation in the Normal view

The Macintosh version still has menus and toolbars Only the Drawing toolbar and Formatting Palette are floating palletes The other toolbars appear in a stack at the top of the screen

Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)

Views Menu

Choose between Normal Slide Sorter and Presentation views

Notes window

Notes for yourself when presenting or a place to record a complete narrative if yoursquore posting your presentation on-line

ThumbnailOutline Pane

Choose between viewing Thumbnail images of your slides or viewing the text in an outline format

Formatting Palette

shows commonly used commands and propertiesndashchanges to show func-tions yoursquore most like to need depend-ing on what yoursquore doing

Drawing toolbar

Used to create and modify graphics

Standard Toolbar

Contains the most common commands

Gallery

Toggles between showing and hiding the Elements Galleries

Elements Galleries

Clicking on these tabs will reveal collections of things from which you can choose in a bar that extends across the window

5

Applying a theme

Referred to as Templates in previous versions Themes define the colors fonts and graphics common to all slides

Windows

Click on the Design tab Mousing over a selection will preview that template in your main window Click to select the theme

Note that there is a scroll bar to the right to show several more rows of choices

To the right of the scroll bar are menus with which you can choose variations in the color palette font and line and fill effects to customize your theme As with the Theme itself mousing over a selection will preview it in your main window and clicking will select it Any theme and variation will be applied to all slides in the presentation

You can apply a different theme to a selected group of slides by right clicking on the theme and selecting Apply to Selected slides in the menu that pops up

Macintosh

Click on the Slide Themes tab to reveal a selection of Themes Note the arrows to the right to display another selection of themes There is no preview You have to click on a theme to apply it to your presentation to get a better view of what it looks like

When you select the Slide Themes tab a Document Theme section appears in the Formatting Palette which allows you to select variations on color and font for your theme

Fonts and moving to a different computer

If you select a different font to apply to your Theme when you move you presentation to a new computer that computer must have that font installed for your presentation to display properly (If it doesnrsquot it will probably defaut to Arial)

On both Windows and Macintosh the selections presented are only those that are installed with that version of Microsoft Office so if yoursquore moving to another computer with that version of Office yoursquore pretty safe

In Windows you have several other options In the Save dialogue box there is a Tools menu which includes a Save Options command In the dialogue that command brings up is a choice to Embed fonts in the presentation insuring that it will display properly on any Windows Computer so you can use any font in your presentation not just the Office fonts

There is no option to embed fonts with the Macintosh version of Powerpoint

6

Entering text on a slide (Windows and Mac)

Unlike word processors which have one continuous string of text graphics programs like PowerPoint can have numerous completely independent text blocks

Text block for slide title

Text block for slide subtitle

The text ldquoClick to add titlerdquo and ldquoClick to add textrdquo are placeholders They are there just to show you the location size etc of the title and text you will put there

When you move the cursor inside the dotted line that defines the title area it will change to the ldquoI-Beamrdquo similar to what you see in a wordprocessor

When you click the placeholder will disappear a flashing insertion point appears and you can begin typing

The text will appear with the size style color and alignment that was defined in the template

After yoursquove typed the title in order to move to the subtitle move the cursor into that area click in that area to begin typing the subtitle

The size of the slide image

Notice that there are no horizontal or vertical scroll bars on the window with the image of the slide since you are looking at a reduced size version of the entire slide The size will depend on the size of your display

The amount of reduction can be seen in 2007 (Windows) with the Size indicator at the bottom right corner of the screen and in 2008 (Macintosh) in the Zoom indicator window at the right size of the Standard tool bar Full size (100) is 75 by 10 inches the size the slide would be if you printed it Depending on the size of your display in the presentation mode the slide may be greater than 100

nb When you have more slides there will be a vertical scroll bar which will allow you to move around your presentation

Windows

Macintosh

7

Inserting a new slide

Changing the layout of a slide

New slides can be inserted by clicking on the New Slide icon on the Home Ribbon (not the Insert Ribbon) in 2007 (Windows) or on the New Slide icon on the Standard Toolbar in 2008 Macintosh (There is also a New Slide command under the Insert menu in the Macintosh version)

Windows

Macintosh

Windows

Macintosh

The first slide in your presentation had the Title Layout The new slide which you just created will have the Title and Content Layout which allows you to type a bulleted list or insert several types of other content

You can change the slide to other layouts for other purposes such as

middot Title Only or Blank for graphics slides

middot Two Content slides for two columns or an im-age and some text side by side

middot Title or Section Header to indicate major sections of your presentation

Windows

Next to the Insert Slide icon is a Layout menu

Macintosh

Click the Slide Layouts tab to display the Slide Layouts Gallery

If you change the layout of a slide the next slide you insert will have that same layout

8

Outline levels on a bulleted list

In the bulleted list in order to create a new bullet press Return

In order to create a 2nd level bullet press Return then Tab At the end of the item pressing Return will start another 2nd level bullet

To indent to a further level press Return and Tab again

In order to return to a higher level after pressing Return press the Shift and Tab keys together

You can also change the level of an item by clicking anywhere in the line and clicking the PromoteDemote button which is in the center of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Bullets and Number section of the Formatting Pallette in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Promote to a higher outline level

Demote to a lower outline level

If you find yourself going to the third and lower levels of an outline consider using multiple slides to present these as separate points to make your presentation more focused

Changing attributes of text

Text formatting functions are found in the middle of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in several sec-tions of the Formatting Pallete in 2008 (Macintosh)

In order to change the attributes of text it has to be selectedmdashthat is you click and drag over the text you want to change For some functions that apply to whole paragraphs or whole text blocks you can just click anywhere in the text block If you donrsquot have anything selected commands and functions will appear faded out and wonrsquot do anything

9

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Hue

Sat

urat

ion

Bri

ghtn

ess

Hue

Saturation

Bri

ghtn

ess

Changing the color of text

You can emphasize or highlight certain words or passages by changing the color of the text

The Text Color icon is on the Home Ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Font section of the Formatting Palette in 2008 (Macintosh) The icon is in two parts Clicking the left side with the letter A and the color swatch will change any selected text to the last color used Clicking the right side with the small downward pointing triangle will bring down a menu

The top row are the color scheme of the template The last six are intended as accent colors but may not all provide enough contrast to be readable against the background

The next block provides tints of the color scheme colors These may be provide better contrast against the background

Then are a selection of commonly used colors

Any custom colors you create are added in the next row

You can create those custom colors by selecting More Colors

More Colors

Selecting More Colors in Text Color menu brings up a dialogue box with a palette of colors

New colors can be chosen off the Standard Pallete or mixed with the Custom palette

The pallettes look a little different on the Macintosh but work essentially the same way There are also several other schemes to define colors available on the Macintosh

10

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is an icon in the Alignment and Spacing section that you can click to increase or decrease paragraph spacing

In order to numerically control paragraph spacing under the Format menu select the Paragraph command That will display a dialogue box which will allow to adjust Paragraph Spacing

Changing line and paragraph spacing

Occasionally you might want to separate bullet points with additional spacing Most peoplersquos first instinct is to put extra hard returns but that puts unnecessarily large spaces between point Another common response is to increase line spacing but that puts the same amount of space within a bullet point as it does between bullet points making it difficult to separate one point from another The best response is to use Paragraph Spacing which give you variable spacing between points but leaves normal spacing within a point

LIne spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that

wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Hard returns between points

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Paragraph spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Same amount of space within a point as between points Hard to ready

Normal spacing within points but too much between points

Normal spacing within points and just enough between points to separate them

Examples of line spacing choices

In 2007 (Windows) on the Home ribbon there is a Line Spacing icon to the right side of the text formatting section Use that to pull down a menu and select Line Spacing Options That displays a dialogue box which allows you to adjust Paragraph Spacing

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

3

Microsoft Office Button

If yoursquore looking for all the things that normally show up under the File menu theyrsquore now located under the unlabeled Microsoft Office Button

A new file format

Both 2007 (Windows) and 2008 (Macintosh) save files in a new file format using the file extension pptx

The main advantage of the new for-mat is that files are significantly smaller

Users of some earlier versions of Powerpoint 2000 XP(2002) and 2003 can download a plug-in that allows them to open the new format There are no converters for earlier Macintosh versions

If you donrsquot know what version of Powerpoint your presentation will be viewed in you can save it in the old format (ppt) The new versions will open the older format

If you know that you will be presenting with Powerpoint 2007 or 2008 the new format will save your presentation with a significantly smaller file size

Windows

Macintosh

4

When you launch Powerpoint 2008 you are also presented with the first slide in the Title layout of a blank presentation in the Normal view

The Macintosh version still has menus and toolbars Only the Drawing toolbar and Formatting Palette are floating palletes The other toolbars appear in a stack at the top of the screen

Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)

Views Menu

Choose between Normal Slide Sorter and Presentation views

Notes window

Notes for yourself when presenting or a place to record a complete narrative if yoursquore posting your presentation on-line

ThumbnailOutline Pane

Choose between viewing Thumbnail images of your slides or viewing the text in an outline format

Formatting Palette

shows commonly used commands and propertiesndashchanges to show func-tions yoursquore most like to need depend-ing on what yoursquore doing

Drawing toolbar

Used to create and modify graphics

Standard Toolbar

Contains the most common commands

Gallery

Toggles between showing and hiding the Elements Galleries

Elements Galleries

Clicking on these tabs will reveal collections of things from which you can choose in a bar that extends across the window

5

Applying a theme

Referred to as Templates in previous versions Themes define the colors fonts and graphics common to all slides

Windows

Click on the Design tab Mousing over a selection will preview that template in your main window Click to select the theme

Note that there is a scroll bar to the right to show several more rows of choices

To the right of the scroll bar are menus with which you can choose variations in the color palette font and line and fill effects to customize your theme As with the Theme itself mousing over a selection will preview it in your main window and clicking will select it Any theme and variation will be applied to all slides in the presentation

You can apply a different theme to a selected group of slides by right clicking on the theme and selecting Apply to Selected slides in the menu that pops up

Macintosh

Click on the Slide Themes tab to reveal a selection of Themes Note the arrows to the right to display another selection of themes There is no preview You have to click on a theme to apply it to your presentation to get a better view of what it looks like

When you select the Slide Themes tab a Document Theme section appears in the Formatting Palette which allows you to select variations on color and font for your theme

Fonts and moving to a different computer

If you select a different font to apply to your Theme when you move you presentation to a new computer that computer must have that font installed for your presentation to display properly (If it doesnrsquot it will probably defaut to Arial)

On both Windows and Macintosh the selections presented are only those that are installed with that version of Microsoft Office so if yoursquore moving to another computer with that version of Office yoursquore pretty safe

In Windows you have several other options In the Save dialogue box there is a Tools menu which includes a Save Options command In the dialogue that command brings up is a choice to Embed fonts in the presentation insuring that it will display properly on any Windows Computer so you can use any font in your presentation not just the Office fonts

There is no option to embed fonts with the Macintosh version of Powerpoint

6

Entering text on a slide (Windows and Mac)

Unlike word processors which have one continuous string of text graphics programs like PowerPoint can have numerous completely independent text blocks

Text block for slide title

Text block for slide subtitle

The text ldquoClick to add titlerdquo and ldquoClick to add textrdquo are placeholders They are there just to show you the location size etc of the title and text you will put there

When you move the cursor inside the dotted line that defines the title area it will change to the ldquoI-Beamrdquo similar to what you see in a wordprocessor

When you click the placeholder will disappear a flashing insertion point appears and you can begin typing

The text will appear with the size style color and alignment that was defined in the template

After yoursquove typed the title in order to move to the subtitle move the cursor into that area click in that area to begin typing the subtitle

The size of the slide image

Notice that there are no horizontal or vertical scroll bars on the window with the image of the slide since you are looking at a reduced size version of the entire slide The size will depend on the size of your display

The amount of reduction can be seen in 2007 (Windows) with the Size indicator at the bottom right corner of the screen and in 2008 (Macintosh) in the Zoom indicator window at the right size of the Standard tool bar Full size (100) is 75 by 10 inches the size the slide would be if you printed it Depending on the size of your display in the presentation mode the slide may be greater than 100

nb When you have more slides there will be a vertical scroll bar which will allow you to move around your presentation

Windows

Macintosh

7

Inserting a new slide

Changing the layout of a slide

New slides can be inserted by clicking on the New Slide icon on the Home Ribbon (not the Insert Ribbon) in 2007 (Windows) or on the New Slide icon on the Standard Toolbar in 2008 Macintosh (There is also a New Slide command under the Insert menu in the Macintosh version)

Windows

Macintosh

Windows

Macintosh

The first slide in your presentation had the Title Layout The new slide which you just created will have the Title and Content Layout which allows you to type a bulleted list or insert several types of other content

You can change the slide to other layouts for other purposes such as

middot Title Only or Blank for graphics slides

middot Two Content slides for two columns or an im-age and some text side by side

middot Title or Section Header to indicate major sections of your presentation

Windows

Next to the Insert Slide icon is a Layout menu

Macintosh

Click the Slide Layouts tab to display the Slide Layouts Gallery

If you change the layout of a slide the next slide you insert will have that same layout

8

Outline levels on a bulleted list

In the bulleted list in order to create a new bullet press Return

In order to create a 2nd level bullet press Return then Tab At the end of the item pressing Return will start another 2nd level bullet

To indent to a further level press Return and Tab again

In order to return to a higher level after pressing Return press the Shift and Tab keys together

You can also change the level of an item by clicking anywhere in the line and clicking the PromoteDemote button which is in the center of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Bullets and Number section of the Formatting Pallette in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Promote to a higher outline level

Demote to a lower outline level

If you find yourself going to the third and lower levels of an outline consider using multiple slides to present these as separate points to make your presentation more focused

Changing attributes of text

Text formatting functions are found in the middle of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in several sec-tions of the Formatting Pallete in 2008 (Macintosh)

In order to change the attributes of text it has to be selectedmdashthat is you click and drag over the text you want to change For some functions that apply to whole paragraphs or whole text blocks you can just click anywhere in the text block If you donrsquot have anything selected commands and functions will appear faded out and wonrsquot do anything

9

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Hue

Sat

urat

ion

Bri

ghtn

ess

Hue

Saturation

Bri

ghtn

ess

Changing the color of text

You can emphasize or highlight certain words or passages by changing the color of the text

The Text Color icon is on the Home Ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Font section of the Formatting Palette in 2008 (Macintosh) The icon is in two parts Clicking the left side with the letter A and the color swatch will change any selected text to the last color used Clicking the right side with the small downward pointing triangle will bring down a menu

The top row are the color scheme of the template The last six are intended as accent colors but may not all provide enough contrast to be readable against the background

The next block provides tints of the color scheme colors These may be provide better contrast against the background

Then are a selection of commonly used colors

Any custom colors you create are added in the next row

You can create those custom colors by selecting More Colors

More Colors

Selecting More Colors in Text Color menu brings up a dialogue box with a palette of colors

New colors can be chosen off the Standard Pallete or mixed with the Custom palette

The pallettes look a little different on the Macintosh but work essentially the same way There are also several other schemes to define colors available on the Macintosh

10

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is an icon in the Alignment and Spacing section that you can click to increase or decrease paragraph spacing

In order to numerically control paragraph spacing under the Format menu select the Paragraph command That will display a dialogue box which will allow to adjust Paragraph Spacing

Changing line and paragraph spacing

Occasionally you might want to separate bullet points with additional spacing Most peoplersquos first instinct is to put extra hard returns but that puts unnecessarily large spaces between point Another common response is to increase line spacing but that puts the same amount of space within a bullet point as it does between bullet points making it difficult to separate one point from another The best response is to use Paragraph Spacing which give you variable spacing between points but leaves normal spacing within a point

LIne spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that

wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Hard returns between points

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Paragraph spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Same amount of space within a point as between points Hard to ready

Normal spacing within points but too much between points

Normal spacing within points and just enough between points to separate them

Examples of line spacing choices

In 2007 (Windows) on the Home ribbon there is a Line Spacing icon to the right side of the text formatting section Use that to pull down a menu and select Line Spacing Options That displays a dialogue box which allows you to adjust Paragraph Spacing

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

4

When you launch Powerpoint 2008 you are also presented with the first slide in the Title layout of a blank presentation in the Normal view

The Macintosh version still has menus and toolbars Only the Drawing toolbar and Formatting Palette are floating palletes The other toolbars appear in a stack at the top of the screen

Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)

Views Menu

Choose between Normal Slide Sorter and Presentation views

Notes window

Notes for yourself when presenting or a place to record a complete narrative if yoursquore posting your presentation on-line

ThumbnailOutline Pane

Choose between viewing Thumbnail images of your slides or viewing the text in an outline format

Formatting Palette

shows commonly used commands and propertiesndashchanges to show func-tions yoursquore most like to need depend-ing on what yoursquore doing

Drawing toolbar

Used to create and modify graphics

Standard Toolbar

Contains the most common commands

Gallery

Toggles between showing and hiding the Elements Galleries

Elements Galleries

Clicking on these tabs will reveal collections of things from which you can choose in a bar that extends across the window

5

Applying a theme

Referred to as Templates in previous versions Themes define the colors fonts and graphics common to all slides

Windows

Click on the Design tab Mousing over a selection will preview that template in your main window Click to select the theme

Note that there is a scroll bar to the right to show several more rows of choices

To the right of the scroll bar are menus with which you can choose variations in the color palette font and line and fill effects to customize your theme As with the Theme itself mousing over a selection will preview it in your main window and clicking will select it Any theme and variation will be applied to all slides in the presentation

You can apply a different theme to a selected group of slides by right clicking on the theme and selecting Apply to Selected slides in the menu that pops up

Macintosh

Click on the Slide Themes tab to reveal a selection of Themes Note the arrows to the right to display another selection of themes There is no preview You have to click on a theme to apply it to your presentation to get a better view of what it looks like

When you select the Slide Themes tab a Document Theme section appears in the Formatting Palette which allows you to select variations on color and font for your theme

Fonts and moving to a different computer

If you select a different font to apply to your Theme when you move you presentation to a new computer that computer must have that font installed for your presentation to display properly (If it doesnrsquot it will probably defaut to Arial)

On both Windows and Macintosh the selections presented are only those that are installed with that version of Microsoft Office so if yoursquore moving to another computer with that version of Office yoursquore pretty safe

In Windows you have several other options In the Save dialogue box there is a Tools menu which includes a Save Options command In the dialogue that command brings up is a choice to Embed fonts in the presentation insuring that it will display properly on any Windows Computer so you can use any font in your presentation not just the Office fonts

There is no option to embed fonts with the Macintosh version of Powerpoint

6

Entering text on a slide (Windows and Mac)

Unlike word processors which have one continuous string of text graphics programs like PowerPoint can have numerous completely independent text blocks

Text block for slide title

Text block for slide subtitle

The text ldquoClick to add titlerdquo and ldquoClick to add textrdquo are placeholders They are there just to show you the location size etc of the title and text you will put there

When you move the cursor inside the dotted line that defines the title area it will change to the ldquoI-Beamrdquo similar to what you see in a wordprocessor

When you click the placeholder will disappear a flashing insertion point appears and you can begin typing

The text will appear with the size style color and alignment that was defined in the template

After yoursquove typed the title in order to move to the subtitle move the cursor into that area click in that area to begin typing the subtitle

The size of the slide image

Notice that there are no horizontal or vertical scroll bars on the window with the image of the slide since you are looking at a reduced size version of the entire slide The size will depend on the size of your display

The amount of reduction can be seen in 2007 (Windows) with the Size indicator at the bottom right corner of the screen and in 2008 (Macintosh) in the Zoom indicator window at the right size of the Standard tool bar Full size (100) is 75 by 10 inches the size the slide would be if you printed it Depending on the size of your display in the presentation mode the slide may be greater than 100

nb When you have more slides there will be a vertical scroll bar which will allow you to move around your presentation

Windows

Macintosh

7

Inserting a new slide

Changing the layout of a slide

New slides can be inserted by clicking on the New Slide icon on the Home Ribbon (not the Insert Ribbon) in 2007 (Windows) or on the New Slide icon on the Standard Toolbar in 2008 Macintosh (There is also a New Slide command under the Insert menu in the Macintosh version)

Windows

Macintosh

Windows

Macintosh

The first slide in your presentation had the Title Layout The new slide which you just created will have the Title and Content Layout which allows you to type a bulleted list or insert several types of other content

You can change the slide to other layouts for other purposes such as

middot Title Only or Blank for graphics slides

middot Two Content slides for two columns or an im-age and some text side by side

middot Title or Section Header to indicate major sections of your presentation

Windows

Next to the Insert Slide icon is a Layout menu

Macintosh

Click the Slide Layouts tab to display the Slide Layouts Gallery

If you change the layout of a slide the next slide you insert will have that same layout

8

Outline levels on a bulleted list

In the bulleted list in order to create a new bullet press Return

In order to create a 2nd level bullet press Return then Tab At the end of the item pressing Return will start another 2nd level bullet

To indent to a further level press Return and Tab again

In order to return to a higher level after pressing Return press the Shift and Tab keys together

You can also change the level of an item by clicking anywhere in the line and clicking the PromoteDemote button which is in the center of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Bullets and Number section of the Formatting Pallette in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Promote to a higher outline level

Demote to a lower outline level

If you find yourself going to the third and lower levels of an outline consider using multiple slides to present these as separate points to make your presentation more focused

Changing attributes of text

Text formatting functions are found in the middle of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in several sec-tions of the Formatting Pallete in 2008 (Macintosh)

In order to change the attributes of text it has to be selectedmdashthat is you click and drag over the text you want to change For some functions that apply to whole paragraphs or whole text blocks you can just click anywhere in the text block If you donrsquot have anything selected commands and functions will appear faded out and wonrsquot do anything

9

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Hue

Sat

urat

ion

Bri

ghtn

ess

Hue

Saturation

Bri

ghtn

ess

Changing the color of text

You can emphasize or highlight certain words or passages by changing the color of the text

The Text Color icon is on the Home Ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Font section of the Formatting Palette in 2008 (Macintosh) The icon is in two parts Clicking the left side with the letter A and the color swatch will change any selected text to the last color used Clicking the right side with the small downward pointing triangle will bring down a menu

The top row are the color scheme of the template The last six are intended as accent colors but may not all provide enough contrast to be readable against the background

The next block provides tints of the color scheme colors These may be provide better contrast against the background

Then are a selection of commonly used colors

Any custom colors you create are added in the next row

You can create those custom colors by selecting More Colors

More Colors

Selecting More Colors in Text Color menu brings up a dialogue box with a palette of colors

New colors can be chosen off the Standard Pallete or mixed with the Custom palette

The pallettes look a little different on the Macintosh but work essentially the same way There are also several other schemes to define colors available on the Macintosh

10

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is an icon in the Alignment and Spacing section that you can click to increase or decrease paragraph spacing

In order to numerically control paragraph spacing under the Format menu select the Paragraph command That will display a dialogue box which will allow to adjust Paragraph Spacing

Changing line and paragraph spacing

Occasionally you might want to separate bullet points with additional spacing Most peoplersquos first instinct is to put extra hard returns but that puts unnecessarily large spaces between point Another common response is to increase line spacing but that puts the same amount of space within a bullet point as it does between bullet points making it difficult to separate one point from another The best response is to use Paragraph Spacing which give you variable spacing between points but leaves normal spacing within a point

LIne spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that

wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Hard returns between points

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Paragraph spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Same amount of space within a point as between points Hard to ready

Normal spacing within points but too much between points

Normal spacing within points and just enough between points to separate them

Examples of line spacing choices

In 2007 (Windows) on the Home ribbon there is a Line Spacing icon to the right side of the text formatting section Use that to pull down a menu and select Line Spacing Options That displays a dialogue box which allows you to adjust Paragraph Spacing

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

5

Applying a theme

Referred to as Templates in previous versions Themes define the colors fonts and graphics common to all slides

Windows

Click on the Design tab Mousing over a selection will preview that template in your main window Click to select the theme

Note that there is a scroll bar to the right to show several more rows of choices

To the right of the scroll bar are menus with which you can choose variations in the color palette font and line and fill effects to customize your theme As with the Theme itself mousing over a selection will preview it in your main window and clicking will select it Any theme and variation will be applied to all slides in the presentation

You can apply a different theme to a selected group of slides by right clicking on the theme and selecting Apply to Selected slides in the menu that pops up

Macintosh

Click on the Slide Themes tab to reveal a selection of Themes Note the arrows to the right to display another selection of themes There is no preview You have to click on a theme to apply it to your presentation to get a better view of what it looks like

When you select the Slide Themes tab a Document Theme section appears in the Formatting Palette which allows you to select variations on color and font for your theme

Fonts and moving to a different computer

If you select a different font to apply to your Theme when you move you presentation to a new computer that computer must have that font installed for your presentation to display properly (If it doesnrsquot it will probably defaut to Arial)

On both Windows and Macintosh the selections presented are only those that are installed with that version of Microsoft Office so if yoursquore moving to another computer with that version of Office yoursquore pretty safe

In Windows you have several other options In the Save dialogue box there is a Tools menu which includes a Save Options command In the dialogue that command brings up is a choice to Embed fonts in the presentation insuring that it will display properly on any Windows Computer so you can use any font in your presentation not just the Office fonts

There is no option to embed fonts with the Macintosh version of Powerpoint

6

Entering text on a slide (Windows and Mac)

Unlike word processors which have one continuous string of text graphics programs like PowerPoint can have numerous completely independent text blocks

Text block for slide title

Text block for slide subtitle

The text ldquoClick to add titlerdquo and ldquoClick to add textrdquo are placeholders They are there just to show you the location size etc of the title and text you will put there

When you move the cursor inside the dotted line that defines the title area it will change to the ldquoI-Beamrdquo similar to what you see in a wordprocessor

When you click the placeholder will disappear a flashing insertion point appears and you can begin typing

The text will appear with the size style color and alignment that was defined in the template

After yoursquove typed the title in order to move to the subtitle move the cursor into that area click in that area to begin typing the subtitle

The size of the slide image

Notice that there are no horizontal or vertical scroll bars on the window with the image of the slide since you are looking at a reduced size version of the entire slide The size will depend on the size of your display

The amount of reduction can be seen in 2007 (Windows) with the Size indicator at the bottom right corner of the screen and in 2008 (Macintosh) in the Zoom indicator window at the right size of the Standard tool bar Full size (100) is 75 by 10 inches the size the slide would be if you printed it Depending on the size of your display in the presentation mode the slide may be greater than 100

nb When you have more slides there will be a vertical scroll bar which will allow you to move around your presentation

Windows

Macintosh

7

Inserting a new slide

Changing the layout of a slide

New slides can be inserted by clicking on the New Slide icon on the Home Ribbon (not the Insert Ribbon) in 2007 (Windows) or on the New Slide icon on the Standard Toolbar in 2008 Macintosh (There is also a New Slide command under the Insert menu in the Macintosh version)

Windows

Macintosh

Windows

Macintosh

The first slide in your presentation had the Title Layout The new slide which you just created will have the Title and Content Layout which allows you to type a bulleted list or insert several types of other content

You can change the slide to other layouts for other purposes such as

middot Title Only or Blank for graphics slides

middot Two Content slides for two columns or an im-age and some text side by side

middot Title or Section Header to indicate major sections of your presentation

Windows

Next to the Insert Slide icon is a Layout menu

Macintosh

Click the Slide Layouts tab to display the Slide Layouts Gallery

If you change the layout of a slide the next slide you insert will have that same layout

8

Outline levels on a bulleted list

In the bulleted list in order to create a new bullet press Return

In order to create a 2nd level bullet press Return then Tab At the end of the item pressing Return will start another 2nd level bullet

To indent to a further level press Return and Tab again

In order to return to a higher level after pressing Return press the Shift and Tab keys together

You can also change the level of an item by clicking anywhere in the line and clicking the PromoteDemote button which is in the center of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Bullets and Number section of the Formatting Pallette in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Promote to a higher outline level

Demote to a lower outline level

If you find yourself going to the third and lower levels of an outline consider using multiple slides to present these as separate points to make your presentation more focused

Changing attributes of text

Text formatting functions are found in the middle of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in several sec-tions of the Formatting Pallete in 2008 (Macintosh)

In order to change the attributes of text it has to be selectedmdashthat is you click and drag over the text you want to change For some functions that apply to whole paragraphs or whole text blocks you can just click anywhere in the text block If you donrsquot have anything selected commands and functions will appear faded out and wonrsquot do anything

9

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Hue

Sat

urat

ion

Bri

ghtn

ess

Hue

Saturation

Bri

ghtn

ess

Changing the color of text

You can emphasize or highlight certain words or passages by changing the color of the text

The Text Color icon is on the Home Ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Font section of the Formatting Palette in 2008 (Macintosh) The icon is in two parts Clicking the left side with the letter A and the color swatch will change any selected text to the last color used Clicking the right side with the small downward pointing triangle will bring down a menu

The top row are the color scheme of the template The last six are intended as accent colors but may not all provide enough contrast to be readable against the background

The next block provides tints of the color scheme colors These may be provide better contrast against the background

Then are a selection of commonly used colors

Any custom colors you create are added in the next row

You can create those custom colors by selecting More Colors

More Colors

Selecting More Colors in Text Color menu brings up a dialogue box with a palette of colors

New colors can be chosen off the Standard Pallete or mixed with the Custom palette

The pallettes look a little different on the Macintosh but work essentially the same way There are also several other schemes to define colors available on the Macintosh

10

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is an icon in the Alignment and Spacing section that you can click to increase or decrease paragraph spacing

In order to numerically control paragraph spacing under the Format menu select the Paragraph command That will display a dialogue box which will allow to adjust Paragraph Spacing

Changing line and paragraph spacing

Occasionally you might want to separate bullet points with additional spacing Most peoplersquos first instinct is to put extra hard returns but that puts unnecessarily large spaces between point Another common response is to increase line spacing but that puts the same amount of space within a bullet point as it does between bullet points making it difficult to separate one point from another The best response is to use Paragraph Spacing which give you variable spacing between points but leaves normal spacing within a point

LIne spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that

wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Hard returns between points

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Paragraph spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Same amount of space within a point as between points Hard to ready

Normal spacing within points but too much between points

Normal spacing within points and just enough between points to separate them

Examples of line spacing choices

In 2007 (Windows) on the Home ribbon there is a Line Spacing icon to the right side of the text formatting section Use that to pull down a menu and select Line Spacing Options That displays a dialogue box which allows you to adjust Paragraph Spacing

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

6

Entering text on a slide (Windows and Mac)

Unlike word processors which have one continuous string of text graphics programs like PowerPoint can have numerous completely independent text blocks

Text block for slide title

Text block for slide subtitle

The text ldquoClick to add titlerdquo and ldquoClick to add textrdquo are placeholders They are there just to show you the location size etc of the title and text you will put there

When you move the cursor inside the dotted line that defines the title area it will change to the ldquoI-Beamrdquo similar to what you see in a wordprocessor

When you click the placeholder will disappear a flashing insertion point appears and you can begin typing

The text will appear with the size style color and alignment that was defined in the template

After yoursquove typed the title in order to move to the subtitle move the cursor into that area click in that area to begin typing the subtitle

The size of the slide image

Notice that there are no horizontal or vertical scroll bars on the window with the image of the slide since you are looking at a reduced size version of the entire slide The size will depend on the size of your display

The amount of reduction can be seen in 2007 (Windows) with the Size indicator at the bottom right corner of the screen and in 2008 (Macintosh) in the Zoom indicator window at the right size of the Standard tool bar Full size (100) is 75 by 10 inches the size the slide would be if you printed it Depending on the size of your display in the presentation mode the slide may be greater than 100

nb When you have more slides there will be a vertical scroll bar which will allow you to move around your presentation

Windows

Macintosh

7

Inserting a new slide

Changing the layout of a slide

New slides can be inserted by clicking on the New Slide icon on the Home Ribbon (not the Insert Ribbon) in 2007 (Windows) or on the New Slide icon on the Standard Toolbar in 2008 Macintosh (There is also a New Slide command under the Insert menu in the Macintosh version)

Windows

Macintosh

Windows

Macintosh

The first slide in your presentation had the Title Layout The new slide which you just created will have the Title and Content Layout which allows you to type a bulleted list or insert several types of other content

You can change the slide to other layouts for other purposes such as

middot Title Only or Blank for graphics slides

middot Two Content slides for two columns or an im-age and some text side by side

middot Title or Section Header to indicate major sections of your presentation

Windows

Next to the Insert Slide icon is a Layout menu

Macintosh

Click the Slide Layouts tab to display the Slide Layouts Gallery

If you change the layout of a slide the next slide you insert will have that same layout

8

Outline levels on a bulleted list

In the bulleted list in order to create a new bullet press Return

In order to create a 2nd level bullet press Return then Tab At the end of the item pressing Return will start another 2nd level bullet

To indent to a further level press Return and Tab again

In order to return to a higher level after pressing Return press the Shift and Tab keys together

You can also change the level of an item by clicking anywhere in the line and clicking the PromoteDemote button which is in the center of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Bullets and Number section of the Formatting Pallette in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Promote to a higher outline level

Demote to a lower outline level

If you find yourself going to the third and lower levels of an outline consider using multiple slides to present these as separate points to make your presentation more focused

Changing attributes of text

Text formatting functions are found in the middle of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in several sec-tions of the Formatting Pallete in 2008 (Macintosh)

In order to change the attributes of text it has to be selectedmdashthat is you click and drag over the text you want to change For some functions that apply to whole paragraphs or whole text blocks you can just click anywhere in the text block If you donrsquot have anything selected commands and functions will appear faded out and wonrsquot do anything

9

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Hue

Sat

urat

ion

Bri

ghtn

ess

Hue

Saturation

Bri

ghtn

ess

Changing the color of text

You can emphasize or highlight certain words or passages by changing the color of the text

The Text Color icon is on the Home Ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Font section of the Formatting Palette in 2008 (Macintosh) The icon is in two parts Clicking the left side with the letter A and the color swatch will change any selected text to the last color used Clicking the right side with the small downward pointing triangle will bring down a menu

The top row are the color scheme of the template The last six are intended as accent colors but may not all provide enough contrast to be readable against the background

The next block provides tints of the color scheme colors These may be provide better contrast against the background

Then are a selection of commonly used colors

Any custom colors you create are added in the next row

You can create those custom colors by selecting More Colors

More Colors

Selecting More Colors in Text Color menu brings up a dialogue box with a palette of colors

New colors can be chosen off the Standard Pallete or mixed with the Custom palette

The pallettes look a little different on the Macintosh but work essentially the same way There are also several other schemes to define colors available on the Macintosh

10

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is an icon in the Alignment and Spacing section that you can click to increase or decrease paragraph spacing

In order to numerically control paragraph spacing under the Format menu select the Paragraph command That will display a dialogue box which will allow to adjust Paragraph Spacing

Changing line and paragraph spacing

Occasionally you might want to separate bullet points with additional spacing Most peoplersquos first instinct is to put extra hard returns but that puts unnecessarily large spaces between point Another common response is to increase line spacing but that puts the same amount of space within a bullet point as it does between bullet points making it difficult to separate one point from another The best response is to use Paragraph Spacing which give you variable spacing between points but leaves normal spacing within a point

LIne spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that

wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Hard returns between points

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Paragraph spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Same amount of space within a point as between points Hard to ready

Normal spacing within points but too much between points

Normal spacing within points and just enough between points to separate them

Examples of line spacing choices

In 2007 (Windows) on the Home ribbon there is a Line Spacing icon to the right side of the text formatting section Use that to pull down a menu and select Line Spacing Options That displays a dialogue box which allows you to adjust Paragraph Spacing

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

7

Inserting a new slide

Changing the layout of a slide

New slides can be inserted by clicking on the New Slide icon on the Home Ribbon (not the Insert Ribbon) in 2007 (Windows) or on the New Slide icon on the Standard Toolbar in 2008 Macintosh (There is also a New Slide command under the Insert menu in the Macintosh version)

Windows

Macintosh

Windows

Macintosh

The first slide in your presentation had the Title Layout The new slide which you just created will have the Title and Content Layout which allows you to type a bulleted list or insert several types of other content

You can change the slide to other layouts for other purposes such as

middot Title Only or Blank for graphics slides

middot Two Content slides for two columns or an im-age and some text side by side

middot Title or Section Header to indicate major sections of your presentation

Windows

Next to the Insert Slide icon is a Layout menu

Macintosh

Click the Slide Layouts tab to display the Slide Layouts Gallery

If you change the layout of a slide the next slide you insert will have that same layout

8

Outline levels on a bulleted list

In the bulleted list in order to create a new bullet press Return

In order to create a 2nd level bullet press Return then Tab At the end of the item pressing Return will start another 2nd level bullet

To indent to a further level press Return and Tab again

In order to return to a higher level after pressing Return press the Shift and Tab keys together

You can also change the level of an item by clicking anywhere in the line and clicking the PromoteDemote button which is in the center of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Bullets and Number section of the Formatting Pallette in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Promote to a higher outline level

Demote to a lower outline level

If you find yourself going to the third and lower levels of an outline consider using multiple slides to present these as separate points to make your presentation more focused

Changing attributes of text

Text formatting functions are found in the middle of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in several sec-tions of the Formatting Pallete in 2008 (Macintosh)

In order to change the attributes of text it has to be selectedmdashthat is you click and drag over the text you want to change For some functions that apply to whole paragraphs or whole text blocks you can just click anywhere in the text block If you donrsquot have anything selected commands and functions will appear faded out and wonrsquot do anything

9

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Hue

Sat

urat

ion

Bri

ghtn

ess

Hue

Saturation

Bri

ghtn

ess

Changing the color of text

You can emphasize or highlight certain words or passages by changing the color of the text

The Text Color icon is on the Home Ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Font section of the Formatting Palette in 2008 (Macintosh) The icon is in two parts Clicking the left side with the letter A and the color swatch will change any selected text to the last color used Clicking the right side with the small downward pointing triangle will bring down a menu

The top row are the color scheme of the template The last six are intended as accent colors but may not all provide enough contrast to be readable against the background

The next block provides tints of the color scheme colors These may be provide better contrast against the background

Then are a selection of commonly used colors

Any custom colors you create are added in the next row

You can create those custom colors by selecting More Colors

More Colors

Selecting More Colors in Text Color menu brings up a dialogue box with a palette of colors

New colors can be chosen off the Standard Pallete or mixed with the Custom palette

The pallettes look a little different on the Macintosh but work essentially the same way There are also several other schemes to define colors available on the Macintosh

10

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is an icon in the Alignment and Spacing section that you can click to increase or decrease paragraph spacing

In order to numerically control paragraph spacing under the Format menu select the Paragraph command That will display a dialogue box which will allow to adjust Paragraph Spacing

Changing line and paragraph spacing

Occasionally you might want to separate bullet points with additional spacing Most peoplersquos first instinct is to put extra hard returns but that puts unnecessarily large spaces between point Another common response is to increase line spacing but that puts the same amount of space within a bullet point as it does between bullet points making it difficult to separate one point from another The best response is to use Paragraph Spacing which give you variable spacing between points but leaves normal spacing within a point

LIne spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that

wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Hard returns between points

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Paragraph spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Same amount of space within a point as between points Hard to ready

Normal spacing within points but too much between points

Normal spacing within points and just enough between points to separate them

Examples of line spacing choices

In 2007 (Windows) on the Home ribbon there is a Line Spacing icon to the right side of the text formatting section Use that to pull down a menu and select Line Spacing Options That displays a dialogue box which allows you to adjust Paragraph Spacing

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

8

Outline levels on a bulleted list

In the bulleted list in order to create a new bullet press Return

In order to create a 2nd level bullet press Return then Tab At the end of the item pressing Return will start another 2nd level bullet

To indent to a further level press Return and Tab again

In order to return to a higher level after pressing Return press the Shift and Tab keys together

You can also change the level of an item by clicking anywhere in the line and clicking the PromoteDemote button which is in the center of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Bullets and Number section of the Formatting Pallette in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Promote to a higher outline level

Demote to a lower outline level

If you find yourself going to the third and lower levels of an outline consider using multiple slides to present these as separate points to make your presentation more focused

Changing attributes of text

Text formatting functions are found in the middle of the Home ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in several sec-tions of the Formatting Pallete in 2008 (Macintosh)

In order to change the attributes of text it has to be selectedmdashthat is you click and drag over the text you want to change For some functions that apply to whole paragraphs or whole text blocks you can just click anywhere in the text block If you donrsquot have anything selected commands and functions will appear faded out and wonrsquot do anything

9

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Hue

Sat

urat

ion

Bri

ghtn

ess

Hue

Saturation

Bri

ghtn

ess

Changing the color of text

You can emphasize or highlight certain words or passages by changing the color of the text

The Text Color icon is on the Home Ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Font section of the Formatting Palette in 2008 (Macintosh) The icon is in two parts Clicking the left side with the letter A and the color swatch will change any selected text to the last color used Clicking the right side with the small downward pointing triangle will bring down a menu

The top row are the color scheme of the template The last six are intended as accent colors but may not all provide enough contrast to be readable against the background

The next block provides tints of the color scheme colors These may be provide better contrast against the background

Then are a selection of commonly used colors

Any custom colors you create are added in the next row

You can create those custom colors by selecting More Colors

More Colors

Selecting More Colors in Text Color menu brings up a dialogue box with a palette of colors

New colors can be chosen off the Standard Pallete or mixed with the Custom palette

The pallettes look a little different on the Macintosh but work essentially the same way There are also several other schemes to define colors available on the Macintosh

10

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is an icon in the Alignment and Spacing section that you can click to increase or decrease paragraph spacing

In order to numerically control paragraph spacing under the Format menu select the Paragraph command That will display a dialogue box which will allow to adjust Paragraph Spacing

Changing line and paragraph spacing

Occasionally you might want to separate bullet points with additional spacing Most peoplersquos first instinct is to put extra hard returns but that puts unnecessarily large spaces between point Another common response is to increase line spacing but that puts the same amount of space within a bullet point as it does between bullet points making it difficult to separate one point from another The best response is to use Paragraph Spacing which give you variable spacing between points but leaves normal spacing within a point

LIne spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that

wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Hard returns between points

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Paragraph spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Same amount of space within a point as between points Hard to ready

Normal spacing within points but too much between points

Normal spacing within points and just enough between points to separate them

Examples of line spacing choices

In 2007 (Windows) on the Home ribbon there is a Line Spacing icon to the right side of the text formatting section Use that to pull down a menu and select Line Spacing Options That displays a dialogue box which allows you to adjust Paragraph Spacing

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

9

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Hue

Sat

urat

ion

Bri

ghtn

ess

Hue

Saturation

Bri

ghtn

ess

Changing the color of text

You can emphasize or highlight certain words or passages by changing the color of the text

The Text Color icon is on the Home Ribbon in 2007 (Windows) and in the Font section of the Formatting Palette in 2008 (Macintosh) The icon is in two parts Clicking the left side with the letter A and the color swatch will change any selected text to the last color used Clicking the right side with the small downward pointing triangle will bring down a menu

The top row are the color scheme of the template The last six are intended as accent colors but may not all provide enough contrast to be readable against the background

The next block provides tints of the color scheme colors These may be provide better contrast against the background

Then are a selection of commonly used colors

Any custom colors you create are added in the next row

You can create those custom colors by selecting More Colors

More Colors

Selecting More Colors in Text Color menu brings up a dialogue box with a palette of colors

New colors can be chosen off the Standard Pallete or mixed with the Custom palette

The pallettes look a little different on the Macintosh but work essentially the same way There are also several other schemes to define colors available on the Macintosh

10

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is an icon in the Alignment and Spacing section that you can click to increase or decrease paragraph spacing

In order to numerically control paragraph spacing under the Format menu select the Paragraph command That will display a dialogue box which will allow to adjust Paragraph Spacing

Changing line and paragraph spacing

Occasionally you might want to separate bullet points with additional spacing Most peoplersquos first instinct is to put extra hard returns but that puts unnecessarily large spaces between point Another common response is to increase line spacing but that puts the same amount of space within a bullet point as it does between bullet points making it difficult to separate one point from another The best response is to use Paragraph Spacing which give you variable spacing between points but leaves normal spacing within a point

LIne spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that

wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Hard returns between points

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Paragraph spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Same amount of space within a point as between points Hard to ready

Normal spacing within points but too much between points

Normal spacing within points and just enough between points to separate them

Examples of line spacing choices

In 2007 (Windows) on the Home ribbon there is a Line Spacing icon to the right side of the text formatting section Use that to pull down a menu and select Line Spacing Options That displays a dialogue box which allows you to adjust Paragraph Spacing

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

10

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is an icon in the Alignment and Spacing section that you can click to increase or decrease paragraph spacing

In order to numerically control paragraph spacing under the Format menu select the Paragraph command That will display a dialogue box which will allow to adjust Paragraph Spacing

Changing line and paragraph spacing

Occasionally you might want to separate bullet points with additional spacing Most peoplersquos first instinct is to put extra hard returns but that puts unnecessarily large spaces between point Another common response is to increase line spacing but that puts the same amount of space within a bullet point as it does between bullet points making it difficult to separate one point from another The best response is to use Paragraph Spacing which give you variable spacing between points but leaves normal spacing within a point

LIne spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that

wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Hard returns between points

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Paragraph spacing adjusted

bull Your first point

bull A second longer point that wraps to several lines

bull Your third point

Same amount of space within a point as between points Hard to ready

Normal spacing within points but too much between points

Normal spacing within points and just enough between points to separate them

Examples of line spacing choices

In 2007 (Windows) on the Home ribbon there is a Line Spacing icon to the right side of the text formatting section Use that to pull down a menu and select Line Spacing Options That displays a dialogue box which allows you to adjust Paragraph Spacing

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

11

Removing bullets

Sometimes such as when your text block is a single quotation bullets are inappropriate

A palette to control bullets is found in 2007 (Windows) on the Home Ribbon and in 2008 (Macintosh) in a Bullets and Numbering section of the Formatting Pallette

Select None to remove the bullets

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Changing indents

Changing margins

Moving text blocks

Breaking a line without creating a new bullet point (soft return)

In order to change the indents you must display the Text Ruler In 2007 (Windows) this is done on the View Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is done with the Ruler command under the View menu

When you remove the bullet the text block remains as a hanging indent where the second and subsequent lines of a paragraph are indented under the first line

Changing indents is done by sliding the indicators on the left end of the text ruler exactly the way it is done in Word

You can also specify indents numerically by right clicking on a text block and selecting Paragraph from the menu that pops up

Changes the indent of the first line of the paragraph

Moves both at once

Changes the indent of the second and subsequent lines of the paragraph

Occasionally you might want to make a text block wider or narrower

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the small circle at the corner The cursor will change to a two headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will change size and the text will rewrap to fit the new margins

Click in the text block then place the cursor directly over the line that defines the borders of the text block The cursor will change to a four headed arrow When you click and drag the text block will move

In order to create a line break without creating a paragraph break (a new bullet point) place the cursor where you want the line break to be hold the Shift key down and press Return

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

12

Moving around your presentation

View your presentation in the full screen mode

In the Normal View there are several ways to move around your presentation

Click on the thumbnail image or outline of a slide and you will move to that slide

To move rapidly to a particular slide click and drag the box in the scroll bar The title of each slide will pop up as you scroll When you reach the slide you want to go to let go of the mouse button and you will move to that slide

To step forward or backward through your presentation a slide at a time click on the double headed arrows

To view your presentation in the full screen mode click on the Slide Show button on the Views menu

mdashin 2007 (Windows) at the lower right corner of your screen

mdashin 2008 (Macintosh) at the lower left corner of your screen

All the menus toolbars and everything else disappears and your first slide should fill the screen (If you are not on the first slide it will start from the slide you were looking at when you clicked)

To advance to the next slide click the mouse buttonYou can also click the right arrow key to advance and the back arrow key to go backward

When you reach the last slide in the presentation clicking the mouse button again displays a black screen with the message ldquoEnd of slide show click to exitrdquo Clicking again will return you to the Normal View on the first slide

You can also press the Escape key (usually at the top left of the keyboard) at any time to return the slide view at the currently displayed slide

Macintosh

Windows

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

13

The order of slides can be changed by by clicking and dragging the thumbnails or outline of a slide in the lefthand window in the normal view

To change the order of slides click on a slide and with the mouse button held down drag it in the direction you wish to move

As you drag a line appears between slides

When the line is in the position you wish to change the slide to release the mouse button and the slide moves to the new position

Changing the order of slides

This slide has been selected

and moved to here

When the-mouse button is released the slides are rearranged

The Slide Sorter view

The Slide pane on the left side of the Normal view can only accomodate six or seven thumbnails without scrolling If you need to browse and move or manipulate more slides the Slide Sorter view uses the entire work area to display thumbnails

It is accessed by clicking the middle icon in the Views menu found at the lower right in 2007 (Windows) and in the lower left in 2008 (Macintosh)

Macintosh

Windows

Selecting multiple slides

In order to move set up a transition effect or preset animation for more than one slide at a time you have to select more than one slide at a time

Normally if you click on a slide to select it and then click on a second slide the first slide is deselected and the second one becomes selected

In order to select multiple slides hold down the Control key (Windows) or the Command Key (Macintosh) Then as you click on multiple slides they stay selected

If you inadvertantly select a slide you donrsquot want clicking a second time with the Control or Command key held down will deselect it

You can see more slides at once by zooming out with the Zoom control at the lower right of the screen (Windows) or the Zoom window on the Standard toolbar (Macintosh)

Changing the order of slides in the Slide Sorter view works exactly the same as it doeS in the SlideOutline pane of the Normal view

Windows

Macintosh

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

14

Windows

Macintosh

Adding transition effects between slides

Numerous effects are available to change the way one slide changes into another These effects can add some polish to your presentation and to indicate major topic changes in your presentation

Stay low-key for most slides and use the more noticable animated effects to indicate major changes in your presentation or highlight important points

You can apply transitions to a single slide in the Normal view or multiple slides with either the SlideOutline pane or the Slide Sorter view In the Slide Sorter view you have to have at least one slide selected in order to select a transition effect

In 2007 (Windows) transitions are on the Animations ribbon In the Normal view when you mouse over a transition it will preview the transition in the main window In the Slide Sorter view you have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon up by the Microsoft Office Button

In 2008 (Macintosh) there is a Transition tab in the Elements Galleries You have to actually click to apply the transition to get a preview (if you donrsquot like it just click another or click the Undo icon on the Standard Toolbar

You can add a sound and modify the speed of transitions

More choices are available using these scrolling arrows

Cllick this button to add sound or modify the speed of a transition after yoursquove applied it

There are tabs to limit the choices displayed to categories

There may be more transitions in a category than there is room to display Use these arrows to reveal more choices

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

15

Adding sequential presentation to a bulleted list

You can choose to build up a sequence of bullet points that appear with mouse clicks so the audience remains focused on the point yoursquore currently dealing with rather than reading ahead

When the slide first appears only the title is displayed

The first mouse click displays the first bullet point

The second mouse click displays the second bullet point and all associated subpoints

The next mouse click displays the last point Another click will advance to the next slide

In order to apply sequencing you must be in the Normal view and have clicked into a text area with multiple bullet points

Windows

In 2007 you can choose several effects to sequence your text on the Animate Ribbon just to the left of the transitions

All At Once makes the text block appear as one piece

By 1st Level Paragraphs makes each first level bullet point appear in sequence along with itrsquos associated lower level bullet points Just mousing over the effect will preview it in the main window

Macintosh

In 2008 Under the Slide Show menu select Custom Animation or click on the Star tab at the top of the Formating Palette and it will change to the Custom Animation palette

More sophisticated sequencing is available with the Custom Animation function which gives you more choices on how sequences of text as well as graphics are presented

Keep in mind that indiscriminate motion and sound effects can change the character of your presentation and be a distraction from your spoken presentation Stay low key and save obvious effects to give special emphasis to important points or to indicate major topic changes in your presentation What Microsoft characterizes as ldquoexcitingrdquo can give a carnival-like character to your presentation

Macintosh

Windows

In order to sequence your text block click on the green star Entrance icon and select an effect When you select the effect it will preview in the main window

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

16

Inserting Images

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard Toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

The proper size and resolution for an image placed in Powerpoint is determined primarily by the resolution of the output device that is the data projector that will be used to view the presentation

Almost all data projectors have a resolution of 1024 pixels by 768 pixels

We tend to think of digital images in inches (size) at a certain number of pixels per inch (resolution) For applications where images are going to be displayed on a computer screen like presentations and the web itrsquos usually more efficient to think directly in terms of numbers of pixels

Most scanning programs and image editors will allow you to choose to measure your images in a number pixels instead of inches at so many pixels per inch

Powerpoint completely imports pictures into itrsquos files so In preparing digital images it is preferable to save only as much data as necessary to avoid having unnec-essarily monstrous file sizes

Saving unnecessarily high resolution images can occupy stunning amounts of disk space take some time to be read from the disk during the presentation and can actually create a less sharp image in Powerpoint These extraordinarily large file sizes really become a problem when posting your presentation on-line

Too little resolution will result in a blurry image even if the original scan seemed sharp Powerpoint attempts to round off the edge of the square pixels that make up a digital image

The best scheme is to assume an 1024 x 768 pixel screen or projector If you do run into the lower resolution device you wonrsquot have that much excess data to process

Powerpoint does think in terms of physical size so if you have the option create your images at 10 x 75 inches at 100 dpi which translates into 1000 x 750 pixelsndashclose enough to the ideal that yoursquoll never notice This may save you a step or two when importing pictures

The best resolution and size for images imported into Powerpoint

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

17

Changing the size of digital images (before importing)

Even inexpensive digital cameras can acquire images as large as 3000 pixels wide This translates into nine times more information than the projector is capable of displaying Powerpoint will display these large images but with no better quality than the a file with only 1000 pixels

Itrsquos fairly easy to make a copy of your image files more appropriate to import into Powerpoint

Web based resize utilities

There are several web sites where you can upload a file and specify a size in pixels to reduce it to and then download the smaller image file

The most reliable Irsquove found are

httpbigwebpagescombigresizehtm (scroll down to specify size in pixels)

httpwwwshrinkpicturescom (largest size is 1000 pixels wide - close enough)

Windows application

Irfanview a great freeware application which includes resizing as well as many other functions is available for download athttp wwwirfanviewcom ResizeResample is under the Image menu

Macintosh application

Preview is an application that comes standard on Macintosh computers The Adjust Size command is under the Tools menu

Inserting a Picture

Click the Picture icon on the Insert ribbon That will open a file dialogue box

Toward the bottom of the dialogue the Files of Type window should display All pictures and list the extension of the file types which Powerpoint can accept

Normally Powerpoint will default to a My Pictures Folder If your pictures are stored somewhere else use the Look in window at the top to navigate to where your image file is located

The default setting is for Powerpoint to display a small preview of every image file in the directory This may take a few seconds if the files are very large

With the icon at the top of the window you can choose to view the files by name only or in a view where it is not previewed until you click on it

Hovering your mouse over an image will display itrsquos file type and file size

Click Insert to import the file

When you choose Insert Picture Microsoft means importing an image file you have somewhere on disk Clip Art refers to images organized with Microsoftrsquos Clip Art Gallery see Inserting Clip Art

Windows

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

18

Inserting a Picture

Macintosh

In the Macintosh version click on the Picture icon on the Standard tool bar and select Insert Picture from the menu that drops down this will open a file dialogue box

If you choose the columns view in the file dialogue box clicking on an image file will give you a preview in the next column to the right

Click Insert to insert the image

Cutting and pasting from other applications

Pictures (and other objects such as charts) can be selected and copied from other applications such as web browsers and image editing programs and inserted into Powerpoint

Most pictures on the web unless intended for download are small images at low resolution that will be significantly lower quality when enlarged to the full size of a powerpoint slide

The image will be displayed with eight small circles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)

When the image is selected a Picture Tools tab will appear over the Format tab Clicking on that tab will change the ribbon to the FormatPicture Tools ribbon

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

19

Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)

When the image is selected the Picture Quick Styles and Effects and Size Rotation and Ordering sections will appear on the Formatting Palette

The image will be displayed with eight small rectangles one in each corner and one on each side generally referred to as handles

Handles indicate that the image is ldquoselectedrdquo as well as acting as handles for resizing

Rotation

Digital cameras save everything as a horizontal (landscape) image no matter what the orientation of the camera when the picture was taken

Click on the green handle and drag right or left to rotate the image

Holding down the Shift key while rotating will restrict rotation to 15deg increments making it easier to rotate exactly 90deg

Moving the image

When you place the cursor over the image it will change to the four headed arrow Clicking holding down the mouse button and dragging will move the picture around

Be careful not to click on one of the handlesndashthat will change the size of the image

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

20

Resizing the image

Click on the image to select it and display the handles When you place the cursor over one of the handles it will change to a two headed arrow Clicking and dragging the handle will resize the picture

Clicking and dragging one of corner handles will resize the picture proportionately without changing its shape

Clicking and dragging on the top or bottom handle will change the height of the image without changing its width

Clicking and dragging on one of the side handles will change the width of the image without changing its height

If the image overfills the screen when it is imported use the zoom tool a the lower right of the 2007 (Windows) screen or the zoom window on the Standard toolbar in 2007 (Macintosh) to zoom out until you can see the entire image

You can then resize the image to fit the slide

Adjusting brightness and contrast

Occassionally a scanned or digital camera image can be washed out or too dark You can improve the appearance of these images with the brightness and contrast controls Since adjusting one of these usually affects the other you typically have to make adjustments to both brightness and contrast to optimize the quality of an image

In 2007 (Windows) the Brightness and Contrast controls are found at the left of the Format Ribbon in the Picture Tools mode Clicking on Brightness or Contrast will bring down a menu of variations Mousing over these options will preview the effect on the image

Since most pictures require adjustments to both brightness and contrast you can access both by selecting Picture Corrections Options at the bottom of the menu

This will bring up a dialogue box with sliders to control both Brightness and Contrast which will preview as you adjust them

In 2008 (Macintosh) sliders to control Brightness and Contrast are in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar Their effects will preview as you adjust them

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

21

Cropping the image

Often an image doesnrsquot match the shape of the space in which you wish to place it or includes more than you wish to display The cropping tool can remove the extraneous areas of the image

In 2007 (Windows) the cropping tool is at the right of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) it is in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Select the Crop tool will change the appearance of the handles to thick lines

Placing the cursor over one of the handles and dragging will crop the image

Transparent color tool

The Transparenct Color tool allows you to make one color in the image transparent so the background shows through This can make the image of an object seem to float by itself on the slide rather than being embedded in a rectangle of a different color

In 2007 Windows the Set Transparent Color tool is found at the bottom of a menu displayed by clicking on the Recolor item at the left side of the Picture Tools mode of the Formatting ribbon

In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting Toolbar

Select the tool and click on the color you wish to make transparent

Macintosh

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Windows

Reset picture tool

When any of these effects is applied to an image Powerpoint retains the original file

In 2007 (Windows) the Reset picture tool is at the left of the Picture Tools mode of the Format Ribbon In 2008 (Macintosh) itrsquos in the Picture section of the Formatting toolbar

Clicking on it while a picture is selected will revert that image to the way it was when it was imported

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

22

Inserting Clip Art In Microsoft office clip art refers rather specifically to graphics organized by Microsofts Clip Gallery or Clip Organizer application or found on Microsoftrsquos web site Graphics from other sources can be inserted but are referred to as Pictures See Inserting a Picture

Microsoft makes an extensive collection of Clip Art available to illustrate your presentation both installed locally and avail-able through their web site

All of the slide layouts that include a text or content area include six icons with which you can insert several types of images instead of bulllet points

In addition you can insert these types of image on any slide even if you already have text or another image on that slide

If you are putting several images on a slide you may want to begin with a Title Only or Blank slide

In 2007 (Windows) there are icons on the Insert Ribbon to insert images and in 2008 (Macintosh) they are on the Standard toolbar

Remember the little down pointing triangles indicate a menu of additional options

Macintosh

Macintosh

Windows

Windows

Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)

When you select InsertClip Art a Clip Art side bar appears to the right of the main window

The Clip Art sidebar displays all the clip art installed in no particular order All the clip art provided with Microsoft has descriptive terms associated with it Type in a concept and the gallery will display all the pieces associated with that term Images with the small blue globe in the lower left hand corner are on Microsoftrsquos web site and you need to be connected to the internet to access them

Holding the cursor over an item will cause a flag to appear which gives the file size and file type of the image

Images with a wmf extension (Windows) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format )

Click OK and the image will be inserted on the page

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

23

Selecting clip art (Macintosh)

The clip gallery on the Macintosh is organized into categories but also can be searched by key word

In order to determine the type of file click on the properties button and it will tell you the file size and type

Images of the type pic (Macintosh) are object oriented graphics They have small file sizes and can be enlarged or reduced to any size without losing sharpness

Images with a jpg or gif extension are made of up of a pattern of dots and will become blurred if enlarged (Photographs are saved as this type of image but other types of graphics may also be in this format)

Click Import to put the image on the slide

The Macintosh version only searches the Clip Art gallery thatrsquos actually installed on your computer To access a much larger collection from Microsoftrsquos servers click the Online button This will launch your default web browser and will take you to a page where you can enter search terms to find relevant images (Scroll down to the bottom of the page)

To import them into your presentation you must check the box under the image and click the download link at the upper left When the file (which may contain multiple images if you checked multiple images) downloads find it in your Downloads folder It will have a file name something like ClipArt [XXXX]cil Double click on it and the images will import into your Clip Art Gallery in a category named Favorites

Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art

Clip Art is modified exactly the same way Pictures are

Resize by clicking and dragging on the corner or side handles

Move by clicking and dragging the image anywhere except the handles

Rotate by clicking the green handle and dragging

Resizing Moving

  • Starting Powerpoint 2007 (Windows)
  • Microsoft Office Button
  • A new file format
  • Applying a theme
  • Starting Powerpoint 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Fonts and moving to a different computer
  • Entering text on a slide (Windows and Ma
  • The size of the slide image
  • Inserting a new slide
  • Changing the layout of a slide
  • Outline levels on a bulleted list
  • Changing attributes of text
  • Changing the color of text
  • More Colors
  • Changing line and paragraph spacing
  • Examples of line spacing choices
  • Removing bullets
  • Changing indents
  • Changing margins
  • Breaking a line without creating a new b
  • Moving text blocks
  • Moving around your presentation
  • View your presentation in the full scree
  • Changing the order of slides
  • The Slide Sorter view
  • Selecting multiple slides
  • Adding transition effects between slides
  • Adding sequential presentation to a bull
  • Inserting Images
  • The best resolution and size for images
  • Changing the size of digital images (bef
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Inserting a Picture
  • Cutting and pasting from other applicati
  • Image modifying tools 2007 (Windows)
  • Image modifying tools 2008 (Macintosh)
  • Rotation
  • Moving the image
  • Resizing the image
  • Adjusting brightness and contrast
  • Cropping the image
  • Transparent color tool
  • Reset picture tool
  • Inserting Clip Art
  • Selecting Clip Art in 2007 (Windows)
  • Selecting clip art (Macintosh)
  • Resizing Moving and Rotating Clip Art